2006 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle also has
power reclining seatbacks.
See Power Reclining
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the
front seats.
Power Recline Control
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for seat positions.
page 2-51.
Horizontal Power
Control
• Move the front of the control up or down to adjust
the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust
the rear portion of the cushion.
• Slide the control forward or rearward to move the
entire seat forward or rearward.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Massaging Lumbar
The power lumbar controls
are located on the
outboard side of the front
seats behind the power
seat controls.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the outboard
side of the front seats
behind the lumbar switch.
Press the switch to
turn the massaging lumbar
feature on. The ignition
must be on.
Press the lumbar control forward to increase support
and rearward to decrease support. Press the control up
or down to raise or lower the support mechanism.
The massage cycle will run continuously for up to
10 minutes. To stop massage, press the massaging
lumbar switch again, or press the power lumbar switch.
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the
heated seatback.
Heated and Cooled Seats
Your vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats.
H(Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on the
cooled seat.
To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignition must
be on.
J(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn on the heated seat and seatback.
The buttons are located on
the front doors forward of
the door handle.
Press the button to turn on the desired feature. A light
on that button will display to show which feature is on.
There are three temperature settings for each feature. A
column of three lights next to the buttons will display
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or
low. Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights
for medium and one light for the lowest setting.
Driver’s Side Buttons
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Buttons Similar
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will go down one temperature setting.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The controls for the power
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
reclining seatbacks are on
the outboard side of the
front seats behind the
power seat controls.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is
cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under
When the key is inserted into the ignition and the
ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn
off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the
desired button.
Press the control rearward to recline the seatback.
Press the control forward to raise the seatback.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front head restraints lock into place when raised.
To release a front head restraint and lower it, press the
button located at the base of the restraint.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The front and rear head restraints may be able to be
tilted forward and rearward, in addition to being moved
up and down.
The rear head restraints may also be adjustable
up and down. They do not have a release button to
lower them.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Seat
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must
be on.
The buttons are located on
the rear doors.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat
can be converted to a storage area by lowering
page 2-50.
For information on safety belts for this position, see
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the
heated seatback.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn on the heated seat and seatback.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard
rear seat positions.
Press the button to turn on the desired feature. A light
on that button will display to show which feature is on.
There are three temperature settings for each feature. A
column of three lights next to the buttons will display
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or
low. Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights
for medium and one light for the lowest setting.
The rear lumbar support
controls are located on the
rear doors forward of
the heated seat buttons.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will go down one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press forward on
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up
and down to adjust the location of the support.
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling
your lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate
will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are
using the buckle for the center passenger position.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the safety belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by
pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit
in the center position.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
The latch plates for the safety belts in each rear
seating position vary in size. If the center rear or the
left rear latch plate is inserted into the incorrect
buckle, the plate will not latch properly. Be sure you
are using the correct buckle and that the latch
plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
top of the seatback.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-28. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. General Motors recommends that
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Top Tether Anchor
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the
trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
If the position you are
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Do not secure a child restraint in the center front
seat position.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
on page 1-43 if the child restraint has a top tether.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-65. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the overhead
console will be lit and stay lit when the key is
turned to RUN or START.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• a frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger, and
• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
passenger directly behind the driver, and
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
{CAUTION:
roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver is in
the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger is in the side of the passenger’s seatback
closest to the door.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side
impact airbag for the driver and the person seated
directly behind the driver is in the ceiling above the
side windows.
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger and the person
seated directly behind that passenger is in the ceiling
above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. If your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie-down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating airbag will be blocked. Do not let seat
covers block the inflation path of a side impact
airbag. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
Your vehicle has a “dual stage” driver airbag, which
adjusts the restraint according to crash severity using
electronic frontal sensor(s) which help the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact. The “dual stage”
driver airbag inflates to a level less than full deployment
for moderate frontal impacts and to a full deployment
for more severe frontal impacts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle is also equipped with a “dual depth”
passenger airbag that adjusts the restraint according to
crash severity, seat location, and safety belt status using
electronic frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors
which enable the sensing system to monitor the status of
the front passenger safety belt and the position of the
front passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward
position. For more rearward front seating positions, the
passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth (a full
deployment), based on safety belt status and the crash
severity measured early in the event. (Always wear your
safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 17 to 23 mph (27 to 37 km/h) if
the other sensors do not over-ride this. The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has special sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver and
right front passenger’s seats. The seat position sensor
provides information which is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or full
deployment.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed to
deflate more slowly and may still be partially inflated
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback
closest to the door for seat-mounted side impact
airbags, and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle
near the side windows for roof-mounted side impact
airbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing
out of the windshield or being able to steer the
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when
the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls. The
hazard warning flashers will also come on when
the airbags deploy. If you want to turn them off, press
the hazard warning flasher button twice.
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The
passenger airbag status indicator on the overhead
console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
United States
Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags and
the roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped) are
not part of the passenger sensing system.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbags are off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the overhead console can affect the operation of
the airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering (if
equipped) on the ceiling near the side windows, the
bag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,
both the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s airbag, the airbag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,
or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering
for the roof-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped). Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Master Key
Valet Key
There is a master key that works all of the lock cylinders
(driver’s door, ignition, and glove box).
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
There is also a valet key which only operates the
driver’s door and the ignition.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked, and
the trunk can be unlatched from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
60 feet (18 m) away with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
You can also start your vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. Your remote keyless entry transmitter,
with the remote start button, provides an increased
range of operation. You can start your vehicle from an
average range of 195 feet (60 m) away. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running and
you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it
off than you were to turn it on.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following functions are
available with your
vehicle’s remote keyless
entry system:
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or
until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the parking lamps can be programmed to come on for
a set amount of time when the vehicle is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
on the remote keyless entry transmitter may disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press this button to
release the trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P)
for this feature to operate.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Your vehicle may be
started from outside the vehicle using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start”
later in this section for more detailed information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal
lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will
flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to
RUN or the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the parking lamps may flash once to indicate
locking has occurred, or the horn may chirp when the
lock button is pressed again within five seconds from the
previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
pressing the lock button may also arm it. See Content
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember to
bring any additional transmitters so they can also
be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can
have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.
See RELEARN REMOTE KEY under DIC Controls and
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into the notch
located below the trunk release button, and separate
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message
in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keyless
entry transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and
2. Remove the old battery using a pencil or similar
object. Do not use a metal object to do this.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
positive side of the battery facing down. Use a
type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
Cooled seats are not activated during a remote start.
Normal operation of the climate control system will
return after the key is turned to RUN. See Dual Climate
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together. Make sure the cover is on tight, so
water will not get in.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start
the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts
up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system.
If moderate or warmer outside temperatures exist, the
climate control system will default to automatic
temperature control and fan speed to regulate and
maintain a moderate inside temperature. When
the outside temperature is cold, the climate control
system will start up the rear window defogger and
default to the front windshield defrost mode with the
heat on and the fan blower set to high. If the vehicle
has heated seats, they will also turn on.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter, with the remote
start button, provides an increased range of operation.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle
is running. As a result, you may need to be closer to
your vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see “Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation” listed previously for additional
information.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock button
and then press and hold this button to use the remote
start feature.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do
the following:
• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the
vehicle and press the remote start button until
the parking lamps turn off.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press
and hold the remote start button for at least
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing
the remote start button again after the vehicle
has started will turn off the ignition.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that
may be extended with 10 more minutes. If you press
and release the transmitter lock button and then
press and hold the remote start button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter again before the first
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,
repeat these steps while the engine is still
running for a 10 minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended two times.
10 minutes of engine running time has expired,
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the
engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you now
have 15 minutes of engine running. The added ten
minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start and
the engine is still running, insert the key into the ignition,
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been provided, the vehicle must
be started normally with the ignition key to get more
remote vehicle starts.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is
an emission control system malfunction.
{CAUTION:
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
safety information when using remote start in a
closed garage.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors with the key or remote
keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doors
will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move
the shift lever into PARK (P).
From the outside, use either the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located
at the top of the door panel near the window.
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have the person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or
power door lock switch to lock the door.
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door. To
unlock the door, pull up on the knob.
Central Door Unlocking System
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition in ON, the
door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various lock and
unlock settings. For programming information, see DIC
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode. When
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other
doors at the same time by turning the key clockwise in
the door lock cylinder twice.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock
symbol to lock the doors.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has security locks that prevent passengers
from opening the rear doors from the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
by lifting the rear door manual lock knob.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Turn the knob below the security lock label to the
horizontal position to disengage the lock.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock. It is always
recommended that you remove the ignition key when
locking your vehicle.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Turn the knob below the security lock label to the
vertical position to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds
or longer.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Trunk
G (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk
release button is located to the left of the steering wheel
next to the instrument panel brightness control. Press
the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,
your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and
the valet lockout switch must be off.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter to open the
trunk. To disable this feature, see Valet Lockout Switch
on page 2-19.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Rear Seat Pass-Through
Your vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This
door allows you to access the trunk from inside
the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down for the
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through
door, move the release up with your fingers. To close
the door, raise it and push it until it latches.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull
the release handle to open the trunk from the inside.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-down feature. To stop the window as
it is lowering, press down or pull up briefly on the
switch again.
The power window
switches are located on
the driver’s door armrest.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on the front windows. Pull the switch up
to the second position and release the switch to
activate the express-up feature. To stop the window as
it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the
switch again.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
Each power window switch operates with two positions
for both up and down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the
ignition has been turned off. For more information, see
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
{CAUTION:
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window has fully opened.
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
Rear Power Sunshade
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the
rear window.
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver’s door armrest near the
window switches.
The switch is located on
the overhead console.
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block
the glare from the front. The visors also have
side-to-side slide capability.
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf. It
only works while the ignition is on or while the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release
the switch again.
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.
The light will come on when the cover is opened. It
will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has
the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or
down to brighten or dim the light.
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may
get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in
your vehicle.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (On): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature on. When the lockout feature is turned
on, the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless
entry transmitter or the trunk release button located near
the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.
Valet Lockout Switch
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
information.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off, you
can open the trunk using either the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
If the ignition is off and any door is open, the security
light will flash, reminding you to arm the system.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Open the door.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do
the following:
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch
with the door open or the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light should come on
and stay on.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter system. Pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry
3. Close all the doors. The security light should go off
within approximately 30 seconds.
transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate
the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound
and the lamps will flash for about 30 seconds.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by
using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter system, or by starting the car with a valid key.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It
activates only if you use a power door lock with the
door open or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Changes or modifications made to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use the theft system.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock
the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote
keyless entry system and close the door. Wait 30
seconds until the security lamp goes off.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the hazard lights will flash.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with
a valid key.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
page 5-93. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you
may need to have your vehicle serviced.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. This
means you do not have to do anything special to arm
or disarm the system. It works when you insert or
remove the key from the ignition or transition the key
from run, accessory or start from the off position.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has a + stamped on it.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on when trying to start the vehicle, the key may have
a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the RUN position within five seconds of removing
the original key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the
vehicle. The following procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the currently programmed
keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+
to have keys made and programmed to the system.
If you are driving and the security light comes on and
stays on, you may be able to restart your engine.
Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, may not be
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
With the ignition key in the ignition, the key can be
turned to four different positions:
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which the ignition
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks
the ignition and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. To use
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
C (RUN): This position is where the key returns to after
the vehicle is started. This position displays some of
the warning and indicator lights.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR when
the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is in OFF,
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition. See DIC
information.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold
your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time
until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
from RUN to OFF:
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or
if a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition
key to RUN and then back to OFF.
When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
not race your engine when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This
time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds to
clear the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting
about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting
procedure.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side
of the engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid fill
location and next to the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
page 4-38.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located
either on the steering column or on the console
between the seats.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) while the
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you
increase speed may damage the transaxle. Have
your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for
higher speeds until then.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) can be used for towing.
You may want to shift the transaxle to THIRD (3) or,
if necessary, to a lower gear if the transaxle shifts
too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). You should
use THIRD (3) when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy
load, driving on steep hills or winding roads.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
• When going down a steep hill.
Performance Shifting
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than
THIRD (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
If your vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in
driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving
maneuver, the vehicle’s transaxle automatically shifts
to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle
performance. The vehicle will automatically return to
normal operation when you return to normal driving
patterns.
Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unless you
are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine and/or transaxle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal down with your left foot. When you lift your
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light will come on and
stay on until the parking brake is released. See
information.
near the driver’s door.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Column Shift Lever
Shifting Into Park (P)
If your vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use the
following procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):
{CAUTION:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-38.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console Shift Lever
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,
use the following procedure to shift the vehicle into
PARK (P):
{CAUTION:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle
and then to the left.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. See
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-30.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is RUN. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 2-26.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
• Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
• Prevent movement of the console shift lever out of
PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a position other
than OFF.
The shift lock control system is always functional except
in the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less
than 9 V) battery.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your
vehicle serviced soon.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
{CAUTION:
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake after you move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Mirrors
AUTO 3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
for approximately three seconds to turn the compass
on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Intellibeam™, OnStar®,
and Compass
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with OnStar® and a compass display. For
For more information on Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam
Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control System”
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show the
correct direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a similar
magnetic item.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the “auto highbeam”
button for approximately nine seconds until a C is
shown in the compass display.
Automatic Dimming
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic dimming
rearview mirror. The automatic dimming feature is
activated whenever the vehicle is turned on and dims
only during nighttime driving.
The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted to account for zone changes, the
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for zone changes, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
approximately six seconds until a zone number
appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the “auto highbeam” button quickly until
you reach the correct zone number. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the
compass needs calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Compass Calibration
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display. The mirror also
contains OnStar® controls. For more information see
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
Mirror Operation
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button until
a C is shown in the compass display.
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See Compass
Calibration listed previously.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Compass Calibration
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display.
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
Mirror Operation
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button until
a C is shown in the compass display.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See Compass
Calibration listed previously.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has manual fold mirrors, the mirrors can
be manually folded inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the
mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its
original position, push outward. Be sure to return both
mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
If your vehicle has the power foldaway mirrors feature,
do the following:
• Press (C), to fold or unfold the driver’s side mirror.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Your vehicle’s mirror
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
• Press (D) to fold or unfold the passenger’s
side mirror.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them at least three times using the mirror controls. This
will reset them to their normal position.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle is equipped with this feature, the
driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and
off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will
also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror
feature. This feature will allow the driver’s and
passenger’s side mirror to tilt to a factory programmed
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a
dimming feature.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
five-second delay has occurred, the driver’s and
passenger’s side mirror will return to its original position.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is
tilted, the mirror switch may be used.
When you operate the rear window defogger, it also
warms both outside mirrors to help clear them of fog or
for more information.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
OnStar® System
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
OnStar® Services
The Directions and Connections® Plan is included on
new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
Directions and Connections® Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
• Roadside Assistance
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
g (Talk/Mute): Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with
page 3-122 for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial.”
See the OnStar® User’s Guide for more information.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Universal Home Remote
System
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete
the programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance, see
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located in the full floor console, or
in the front of the center seat console. In addition to
this, cup holders are located in the rear armrest.
To access the full floor console cupholder slide the
cover back. To access the center seat console
cupholder, turn the front portion of console.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
Coinholder(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a coinholder.
Center Console Storage Area
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
If your vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the left
lever located in the front of the armrest lid. To access
the lower storage area, lift the right lever. If your vehicle
has a center seat console it will have two storage
areas. To access the upper storage area, press the
button located on the front of the armrest and lift
the armrest lid. To access the lower storage area, pull
the strap located behind the cup holder.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside. Use the key to lock and unlock.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Flex Storage Unit
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center flex storage
unit that includes a front center seat with a lap belt
and an underseat storage compartment. The center
seatback can also be used as a fold down armrest.
Cupholders are also located at the front edge of
the storage unit and can be accessed by folding the
compartment forward.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located on
the overhead console.
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be
stored in the underseat storage compartment as shown.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat center
console and armrest. To open the console, push
the button and lift the lid. Inside the console are
two cupholders that can be pulled out when in use.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be ON
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.
Convenience Net
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s
side switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in
a desired position other than to the express-open
position, press the switch again, in either direction, to
stop the movement. If the sunshade is in the closed
position, it will open with the sunroof, or it can be
opened manually.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a convenience net.
The convenience net attaches to the floor of the
trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the
net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold
the passenger’s side switch forward to vent the
sunroof. The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward
to the full vent position. The sunshade must be
opened manually.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s
door panel, and are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside mirror,
and the steering wheel position if the vehicle has
the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to
the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver’s side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the above steps
and pressing button 2 for a second driver.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recall your memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position.
The seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move
to the position previously stored for the identified
driver. You will hear a single beep.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back, and if
the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature, the power telescopic steering column
will move up and forward.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat and mirror movement will occur.
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic
seat and power telescopic steering column movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror
buttons.
Further programming for automatic seat and steering
wheel movement can be done using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can select or not select
the following:
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
steering column while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the steering column recall may
stop working. If this happens, press the appropriate
control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds,
after the obstruction is removed. Then try recalling
the memory position again by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your GM dealer for service.
• The easy exit seat feature
• The memory seat recall feature
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 3-30.
page 2-26.
R. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).
H. Traction Control System Button (Column-Shift
page 4-9.
S. Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control. See
I. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist and
Adaptive Cruise Control Display (if equipped). See
page 3-19.
on page 3-44.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
instrument panel.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
to lock the wheel in place.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this
feature is located on
the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt
wheel control is located on
the outboard side of the
steering column.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on
or off. A light on the button will display while the feature
is on.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to
start heating.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down
and the steering wheel will go down.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete. If you momentarily press and release the
lever, the turn signal will flash 3 times.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster and in the
outside rearview mirror will
flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is
complete. The lever returns when it is released.
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remind
you to turn it off.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
• Flash-To-Pass Feature
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb.
Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
page 3-13.
on page 3-15.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Rear
on page 3-15.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward to change the headlamps from low
beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release it to
change from high beam to low.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle
too quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a
visual alert with no audible alert if you are following
another vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol
is located on top of the instrument panel to the right
of the driver. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,
within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The FCA control is located
on the steering wheel.
{CAUTION:
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise
page 3-19.
FCA is only a warning system and does not
apply the brakes. When you are approaching a
vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are
following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of
you, FCA may not provide you with enough
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not designed
to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes. For more
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.
FCA is disabled when the green light is off.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
{CAUTION:
The FCA alert symbol will
flash and a warning beep
will sound when driver
action may be required.
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect a
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA
on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as in
fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance is
limited. There may not be enough warning
distance to the vehicle in front of you. Do
not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.
The alert symbol will flash when:
• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle
too quickly.
• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of you
much too closely.
{CAUTION:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might go
into cruise when you do not want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Be
careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons
unless you want to use cruise control.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in
your driving lane.
{CAUTION:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
Unnecessary Alerts
{CAUTION:
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does not
need service.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a
collision under these conditions. Do not use
FCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning
page 3-19.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-76.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. If
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to
use. When you do, the following will occur:
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
• If the headlamps are either off or in the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
• If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switch
to low beam. To return to high beam, push the
lever away from you.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Your vehicle is equipped with wiper-activated
headlamps. After the windshield wipers have been on
for approximately six seconds, the headlamps will
automatically turn on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps
on page 3-34 for more information.
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the wiper band away from you to higher
Rainsense™ II Wipers
sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system
and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting,
level five is closest to low. A single wipe will occur each
time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level to
indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased.
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on
the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on driving conditions and
the sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes
will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur
more frequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate in a
delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed
as needed. If the system is left on for long periods
of time, occasional wipes may occur without any
moisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicates
that the Rainsense™ II system is activated.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense™ II function. The
Rainsense™ II system can be overridden at any time by
manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn off again
once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If
it is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated
The Rainsense™ II system can be activated by turning
the wiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels
indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest to off is
the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more
rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the
moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
_ Heated Washer Fluid: If your vehicle is equipped,
the heated windshield washer fluid system may be
used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs from your
windshield. Sliding the switch on the signal/multifunction
lever to this position and then releasing it will activate
the heated windshield washer fluid system. This
activation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles. The
first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds
to occur, depending on outside temperature. After
the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to 20 seconds
for each of the remaining cycles. The heated
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
windshield washer fluid system may be turned off at any
time by sliding the switch on the signal/multifunction
lever to this position again.
J Washer Fluid: Press and release this paddle,
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,
to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers
will clear the windshield and either stop or return to your
preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and
hold the paddle.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a
normal condition.
A message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. See DIC
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn the cruise control back on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on
long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control is
on, you will see a cruise light on the instrument
panel cluster.
Setting Cruise Control
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
1. Press the cruise control button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button located on the steering wheel
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
I (On): This position activates the system.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, you can press the RES
(resume/accelerate) button to return to your desired
preset speed. The cruise light will be displayed again.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
–SET (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
The vehicle will return to and stay at your preset speed.
If you press and hold the RES button, the vehicle
speed will increase until you release the button or apply
the brake. Unless you want to go faster, do not press
and hold the RES button.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control.
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You will
now cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the SET button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET
button briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle will
slow down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Press the RES button. Hold it there until you get up
to the speed that you want, and then release the
button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES button and then
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
speed up approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by pressing the SET button.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Adaptive Cruise Control
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out
of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift
to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to attempt to use your cruise
control feature.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Erasing Speed Memory
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control. It allows you to keep cruise control
engaged in moderate traffic conditions without having to
constantly reset your cruise control. Adaptive Cruise
Control uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in
your path, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), and
operates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is
engaged by the driver, the system can apply limited
braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically to
maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle ahead.
Braking is limited to 0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of
deceleration, which is comparable to moderate
application of the vehicle’s brakes. To disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the brake. If no vehicle is
in your path, your vehicle will react like traditional
cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance is
limited. There may not be enough distance
to adapt to the changing traffic conditions.
Do not use cruise control when visibility
is low.
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle ahead.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
on winding roads.
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross
your vehicle’s path. If you are driving in
these conditions, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control. The warning beep and alert
symbol may indicate that you are driving
in conditions where Adaptive Cruise
Control should not be used. See “Alerting
the Driver” in this section.
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located on the
steering wheel.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Do
not use cruise control on slippery roads.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the
steering wheel.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
] (On): This position activates the system.
+ Resume (Resume/Accelerate): Push this button to
make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
{CAUTION:
− Set: Press this button to set the speed or to
decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel adaptive
cruise control.
+ (Increase Following Distance): Press this button
to increase the distance between your vehicle and
other vehicles.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in
your path.
− (Decrease Following Distance): Press this button to
decrease the distance between your vehicle and
other vehicles.
Adaptive cruise control will not work if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
1. Press the ] (On) button.
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
2. Get up to the speed you want.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button and then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You will now
cruise at the higher speed.
3. Press in the −SET button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too
close or moving slower than your vehicle.
• Press the RES button. Hold it there until the desired
set speed is displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then release the switch. To increase
your set speed in very small amounts, move the
switch briefly to RES. Each time you do this,
your vehicle set speed will increase by
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of
the instrument panel to the right of the driver. When the
on symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that
Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
1 mph (1 km/h).
A message on the DIC will also display when Adaptive
Cruise Control is set. See DIC Warnings and
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the
set speed.
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when
the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel
to adjust the follow distance.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the plus button to increase the distance or the
minust button to decrease the distance. The first button
press will show you the current follow distance setting
on the DIC. Your current follow distance setting will
be maintained until you change it.
Press the SET button until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
SET button. Each time you do this, your set speed
will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The
follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary
based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed
the further back your vehicle will follow. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when selecting the follow
distance. The range of selectable distances may not
be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If
you prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than
Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage the system
and drive manually.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a
desired speed and then you apply the brake. This will
disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you do
not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the RES button. Adaptive Cruise Control will
be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow
distance (gap) you select.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
{CAUTION:
The Adaptive Cruise
Control alert symbol is
located on the display at
the top of the instrument
panel to the right of
the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
collision. Be ready to take action and apply the
page 4-2.
The alert symbol will flash and a warning beep will
sound when driver action may be required. If Adaptive
Cruise Control is engaged, the alert symbol will
flash when:
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
The Vehicle Ahead symbol is located on the top of the
instrument panel to the right of the driver.
information.
The Vehicle Ahead symbol will only appear when a
vehicle is detected in your path.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect
and react to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you. You
could crash into an object ahead of you. Do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control when
approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving
vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow the
vehicle in front at the selected follow distance. Your
speed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle in
front of you but will not exceed the set speed. It
may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is
active, your brake lights will come on. Braking may
feel or sound different than if you were applying
the brakes yourself. This is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Speed Deactivation
Curves in the Road
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will
begin to disengage. The Driver Alert symbol will
flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver must
take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will not
slow the vehicle to a stop.
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to
use the brakes if necessary. Select an
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise
Control Override
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes. A
message will appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise
Control will return to normal operation and be able
to apply the brakes, if needed.
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a
sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the curve is
too sharp.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens the
Vehicle Ahead symbol will not appear.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not
in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to signs, guardrails, and
other stationary objects when entering or exiting a
curve. This is normal operation. Your vehicle does not
need service.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills and
when towing a trailer depends on your speed, vehicle
load, traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It
may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving
on hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to
use the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When
going downhill, especially when towing a trailer, you
may want to brake to keep your speed down. Applying
the brake disengages the system. You may choose
not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills,
especially when towing a trailer.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal, press
the cancel button, or press the Adaptive Cruise
Control button.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you press the Adaptive Cruise Control button or
turn the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three additional messages that may appear
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.
These messages will appear to indicate a problem with
the Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. If
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
in icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as in
fog, rain or snow.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
9(Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the
exterior lamps except for Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage
the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do
so, see your dealer.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Intellibeam™
Intellibeam™ is an enhancement to your vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on your
rearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
The Intellibeam™ system will turn your high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other
traffic present, and the Intellibeam system is enabled.
• Instrument Panel Lights
• License Plate Lamps
• Tail Lamps
Turning On and Enabling Intellibeam™
Press and release the Intellibeam™ button on the inside
rear view mirror. The Intellibeam™ indicator on the
mirror will turn on to let you know the system has been
turned on. Once the system has been turned on, it
will remain on each time the vehicle is started.
• Side Marker Lamps
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay
on while the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN.
Additionally, the intellibeam system must be enabled.
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed
lamps. A warning chime will sound if you open the
driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on.
To enable the Intellibeam™ system, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light
will appear on the instrument panel cluster when
page 3-70.
- (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with Intellibeam™
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
Intellibeam™ will only activate your high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
When this occurs, Intellibeam™ will be disabled
until the control is turned back to the AUTO position.
The high-beam headlamps will remain on, under the
automatic control of Intellibeam™, until any of the
following situations occur:
• The Intellibeam™ system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
Intellibeam™ may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of
any of the following:
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is
used. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of the
Intellibeam light sensor.
When either of these conditions occur, the
Intellibeam™ feature will be disabled and the
Intellibeam™ light in the mirror will turn off until the
high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze or other obstructions.
• If Intellibeam™ was using low-beams prior to this
action, the Intellibeam™ feature will be temporarily
disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral
position.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the Intellibeam™ indicator
light flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this,
the vehicle’s setting will automatically be reset each
time the ignition is turned off and then on again.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the
vehicle points upward, causing the Intellibeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and
taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You may need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
Cleaning the Intellibeam™ Light Sensor
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
in front of the inside
Disabling and Resetting Intellibeam™
at the Rearview Mirror
rearview mirror.
Intellibeam™ can be disabled by using the controls on
the inside rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (On/Off): To disable the system, press this
button on the inside rearview mirror. The Intellibeam™
indicator will turn off and the will not come back on until
the Intellibeam™ button is pressed again.
(Stalk Disable): When Intellibeam™ has turned on the
high-beams, pull or push the high-beam stalk. This
will disable Intellibeam™. The Intellibeam™ indicator on
the mirror will turn off. To re-enable Intellibeam™,
press the Intellibeam™ button on the mirror.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds.
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
• The transaxle is not in PARK (P) (United
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. The wiper-activated
headlamps will also turn off if the windshield wipers
are turned off.
States only).
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as the
parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the
DRL are being used. Your instrument panel will not be
lit up either.
Headlamps on Reminder
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough
outside, the turn signal lamps will turn off and normal
low-beam headlamp operation will occur.
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough
outside, the regular lamps will go off, and the DRL
will take over. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage,
the automatic headlamp system will come on
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take
approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if there is light outside. During
that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be
as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument
panel brightness knob is in the full bright position. See
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps
were turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off
automatic lighting and shift the transaxle into PARK (P).
Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables the DRL.
The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (P).
When automatic lighting is on and the fog lamps are
turned on, the fog lamps, headlamps and parking lamps
will remain on.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or fog
lamps (if equipped).
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with the
multifunction lever. They provide more light for
cornering.
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
- (Fog Lamps): Your vehicle is equipped with fog
lamps. It is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. This
protects against draining the battery in case you have
accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on.
The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are
turned on after the ignition switch is turned to OFF.
When you press the exterior lamps control, the fog lamp
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on to
indicate that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
Press the button again to turn them off.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn back on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the
backlighting to the door switches and to the exterior
lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the
remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If
activated due to the transmitter, the lighting will remain
active for about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting
system uses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in
order for the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy
lamps turn off approximately 25 seconds after the
last door is closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key
is turned to RUN, or immediately deactivate if the
power locks are activated.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
The button for this control is located below the exterior
lamps control.
Push the button in and release to extend the button.
Turn the button clockwise for brightness of the
instrument panel lights and counter clockwise to turn the
brightness down.
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when
any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle
lamps are located on the bottom of the front and rear
door trim.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays and
backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in
the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature is
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise
to brighten lighting.
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp and
also opera lamps.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer
to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm
as they usually do and the climate control fan may cut
back to a lower speed. For more battery saving
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message” under
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened
and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.
Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if
a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch
is turned on.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle
at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting
than normal to make sure the battery charges. High
electrical loads may occur when several of the following
are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear
window defogger, the climate control fan at high speeds,
heated seats and engine cooling fans.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA)
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is equipped, the Ultrasonic Front and
Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) system is designed
to help you park. It operates only at speeds less than
5 mph (8km/h). UFRPA helps make parking easier and
helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked
vehicles. The UFRPA system detects objects that
are close to the vehicle which are at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level.
The system detects objects up to 4 feet (1.2 m) in
front of the vehicle and up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your
vehicle. UFRPA determines how close these objects
are from your bumpers within this area. Four ultrasonic
sensors on the front and rear bumpers are used to
detect the distance to the object.
Even with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park
Assist system, the driver must check carefully
before backing up or moving forward while
parking. The system does not operate above
speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h). The system does
not detect objects that are more than 4 feet
(1.2 meters) in front of the vehicle and more
than 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle.
Also, the system does not detect objects that
are below your bumper, underneath your
vehicle, or some objects very close to the
vehicle. The system is not designed to detect
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
So, unless you check carefully behind and in
front of your vehicle while you are parking
they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using front and rear
park assist, always check carefully in front and
behind your vehicle before moving forward or
backing up and then watch closely as you do.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The UFRPA lights are used to provide distance and
system information, along with beeps played out either
the front or rear speakers. For objects detected near the
front bumper, high-toned beeps will be played out the
front speakers. For objects detected near the rear
bumper, low-toned beeps will be played out the
rear speakers.
How the System Works
When the vehicle is started, the front display will
briefly illuminate to let you know the display is
operating correctly. When the shift lever is moved into
REVERSE (R), the rear display will briefly illuminate
to let you know the display is operating correctly.
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved out of PARK (P). The system does not work
at a forward speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), so the
front display indicators are turned off. The system
also does not work at a reverse speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red light on
the rear display will flash.
Front Parking Assist
Display
Rear Parking Assist
Display
The front display is located on top of the instrument
panel to the right of the driver. The rear display is
located near the rear window and can be seen by
looking over your right shoulder. The rear display has
three color-coded lights. The front display will have either
three or six lights depending on whether your vehicle is
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). If your
vehicle has ACC, it will have three lights along with the
ACC lights. If your vehicle does not have ACC, it will have
six UFRPA lights.
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information
page 3-72.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works when
Moving Forward
When moving forward, the system detects objects only
near the front bumper.
How the System Works when Backing
When backing, UFRPA detects objects close to the
front and rear bumpers. The first time an object
is detected a single chime will sound. If an object is
detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), or if you are already within an 8 ft (2.5 m)
distance to a detected object when the system
first comes on, the following describes what will occur
according to your distance from an object located behind
the vehicle:
If an object is detected at a forward speed of less than
5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within a 4 ft
(1.2 m) distance to a detected object when UFRPA first
comes on, the following describes what will occur
according to your distance from an object located in
front of the vehicle:
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will be lit.
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
4 ft (1.2 m), two amber lights will be lit. If you have
Adaptive Cruise Control, a single amber light
will be lit.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m ), four amber lights will be lit. If you
have Adaptive Cruise Control, two amber lights will
be lit.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be lit.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red)
will be lit.
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a chime
will sound for a short time and all three lights
(amber/amber/red) will be lit and flashing.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all six lights (four amber lights/
two red lights) will be lit. If you have Adaptive Cruise
Control, all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit.
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a chime will
sound for a short time and all six lights (four amber
lights/two red lights) will be lit and flashing. If you
have Adaptive Cruise Control, a chime will sound for
a short time and all three lights (two amber lights/
one red light) will be lit and flashing.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you are backing the vehicle and objects are
detected at the same time near both the front and rear
bumpers, both color-coded light displays will notify
you of objects close to each bumper. If there are objects
detected near both bumpers, the beeps will only be
sounded to notify that objects are close to the rear
bumper. However, if while you are backing and an object
comes within 1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at
the same time there is another object further than
1 ft (0.3 m) from the rear bumper, then the beeps will
only be sounded to notify you of the closer object that is
near the front bumper.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during
your last drive when you turned off the vehicle. If the
attached objects are removed from your vehicle
before the start of your next drive, the system will
return to normal operation unless an object is
detected when the vehicle is shifted out of park. If
this occurs, you will have to wait until the vehicle is
driven forward above 15 mph (25 km/h) before
UFRPA will return to normal operation.
• A bicycle or an object is attached to the front
bumper during your last drive when you turned off
the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed
from your vehicle before the start of your next drive,
the system will return to normal unless an object
is detected when the vehicle is shifted out of park.
If this occurs, UFRPA will return to normal
operation when the vehicle is driven forward
above 15 mph (25 km/h).
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the UFRPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will
be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear UFRPA display when the shift lever is moved
into REVERSE (R). This occurs under the following
conditions:
• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be
sure to keep your vehicle’s front and rear bumpers
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For
page 5-86. If after cleaning the front and rear
bumpers and driving forward at a speed of at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the DIC displays the PARKING
ASSIST OFF message, see your dealer.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Other conditions that may affect system
performance include vibrations from a jackhammer
or the compression of air brakes on a very large
truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with
UFRPA performance.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
If your vehicle has a stationary center console, the
power outlet is located inside the lower storage area.
There are outlets also on the right front lower part of the
driver’s seat and in the lower storage bin. See Center
• When UFRPA is disabled without driver action and
the driver attempts to turn UFRPA back on using
the Driver Information Center (DIC), the PARKING
ASSIST ON option will not be selectable if the
necessary conditions stated above for normal
system operation are not met.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat
area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check
for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
For Driver Information Center messages related to
page 3-76.
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.
If the bumper is damaged, your UFRPA system may not
work properly. Take the vehicle to your dealer to
repair the system.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
Front Ashtray
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below
the climate control system. To open, push down and
then release the cover. To clean the ashtray, push the
lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the opposite
side of the ashtray’s lip to install.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge
located at the top of the ashtray.
Rear Ashtray
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To use
an ashtray, lift the lid.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle. To avoid window fogging
on rainy and humid days at temperatures above
freezing, run the air conditioning compressor. Also, it is
best to avoid the use of recirculation mode except
when maximum air-conditioning performance is needed
for a short amount of time to avoid exterior odors
and fogging.
The cigarette lighter is located near the front ashtray.
Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will pop
back out by itself once the element has heated for use.
Cigarette lighters can be used to provide electrical
power to accessories. See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 3-42 for more information.
Analog Clock
The clock is located on the instrument panel above the
radio. To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the
clock face.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before you get to the desired time.
Climate Control Panel for Vehicles with Rear
Climate Control
3. Push and release the button to increase the time
by one minute increments until the desired time
is reached.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Automatic Operation
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is
selected on the fan control, the system will adjust the fan
speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when this
position is selected, the climate control fan speed
will lower.
After your vehicle is started, the display will show
the interior temperature settings and the outside
temperature.
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode
control, the system will automatically control the
air conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures
in order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light will
be lit when the system is operating automatically,
even at near freezing outside temperatures. Press the
A/C button on the fan control to turn off the A/C.
For improved window clearing performance in defog or
defrost modes, the A/C compressor will run
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. In cold weather, the system will start at
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into
your vehicle until warmer air is available. The
system will start out blowing air at the floor but may
change modes automatically as the vehicle
warms up to maintain the chosen temperature
setting. The length of time needed to warm
the interior will depend on the outside temperature
and temperature of the vehicle.
automatically in damp cool conditions.
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize in
order for the system to regulate automatically. Then
adjust the temperature as necessary to find your
comfort setting.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO position
is selected on either the fan or mode control, the system
will automatically control the air inlet to supply fresh
outside air or recirculate the interior air to cool the car
faster. The indicator light on the recirculation button will
light whenever the system switches to recirculation. You
may force outside air by pressing the button when the
light is lit. The next time AUTO fan or mode is selected,
the air inlet will reset back to AUTO operation.
9 (Off): Turn the left control to this position to turn
the entire climate control system off.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
positions using the right control:
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn on the
automatic delivery mode operation.
F (Vent): Turn the control to this mode to direct air to
the instrument panel outlets.
Manual Operation
* (Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode to direct
approximately half of the air to the instrument panel
outlets and most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob either to the left or right to
adjust the fan speed. Turning this control completely
counterclockwise will turn on the automatic fan
operation. Turning this control to the “O” position will
turn the climate control system off. If the airflow seems
low when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the
passenger compartment air filter may need to be
page 3-53.
7 (Floor): Turn the control to this mode to direct most
of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to
the side window outlets and the windshield.
The mode control can also be used to select the
floor/defog mode. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the Passenger
temperature setting off, the driver’s temperature
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
? (Recirculation): Press this button to keep outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle
or to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on.
AUX: Press this button to turn the rear climate
control fan on for automatic operation. After the AUX
button is pressed, the indicator light will come on. Press
the button again to turn the auxiliary fan off.
«ª (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press these
buttons next to the fan control to manually increase
or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override
the automatic system and turn the air-conditioning
system on or off. When in AUTO, the air-conditioning
compressor will come on automatically, as necessary.
«ª (Passenger’s Temperature Controls): Press
these buttons next to the mode control to manually
increase or decrease the temperature for the front
passenger. If the passenger’s climate control system is
off, pressing one of these buttons will turn it on.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may notice a small amount of water
dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after
turning off the engine. This is normal.
PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press this
button to turn the passenger’s climate control systems
on or off. The temperature selected by the front
passenger will also control the rear system air
temperature unless the rear seat passengers select
their own comfort setting.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensors
There is also an interior temperature sensor located
next to the steering wheel that measures the
temperature of the air inside your vehicle.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle of
the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to prevent false temperature readings at
startup, the displayed temperature will not change until
the following occurs:
W (Floor/Defog): Turning the control to this mode
directs approximately half of the air to the floor outlets
and the remaining air is directed to the side window
outlets and to the windshield. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 kmh) for
5 minutes.
• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 kmh) for
2 and a half minutes.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
0 (Defrost): Turning the control to this mode
directs most of the air to the windshield and the
side window outlets. In this mode, the system will
automatically turn off recirculation and run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the
AUX button on the front climate control system so
that the light is not lit.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located below
each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the
thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the airflow
or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.
< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of the control
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
20 minutes after the button is pressed if your vehicle is
moving at slower vehicle speeds. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear defogger may stay on continuously.
Each additional press will run the defogger for
approximately 10 minutes.
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up or
down to change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger is on.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The control panel for this system is located on the back
of the center console.
Rear Climate Control System
If the AUX button located on the front climate control
panel is pressed, the rear climate control system will be
turned on. The rear system will operate in automatic
mode and the temperature settings selected for the
front climate control panel will also be selected for the
rear passengers.
If the rear passenger would like to adjust the rear
climate control system, they can select a different
temperature and a different mode or fan speed.
Whenever the rear passengers have adjusted settings
on the rear climate control system, the AUX light is lit on
the front climate control system. The driver can turn
off the auxiliary fan by pressing the AUX button.
When the front climate control system is turned off or in
defrost mode, the rear climate control system is
turned off. The rear system will turn back on once
another front mode is selected.
If your vehicle has a rear climate-control system, the
rear-seat passengers can use it to adjust the direction of
the airflow, the fan speed and the temperature for the
rear-seating area. This system also works with the main
climate-control system in your vehicle.
For more information on how to use the climate control
page 3-44. For more information on the air outlets, see
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
«N ª (Mode): Press these buttons to change the
air delivery mode. If in AUTO air delivery mode, pressing
the up arrow button will cancel automatic operation
and place the system in manual mode. To change the
current mode, select one of the following:
«A ª (Fan): Press this button until AUTO appears
on the display to place the system in automatic mode.
When automatic operation is active, the system will
automatically control the fan speed. If in auto fan mode,
pressing the up arrow button will cancel automatic
operation and places the system in manual mode. If in
auto mode, pressing the down arrow will turn the
rear climate control system off.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper outlets.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs half the air to
the upper outlets, and the other half to the floor outlets.
«N ª (Mode): Press the this button until AUTO
appears on the display to place the system in automatic
mode. When automatic operation is active, the system
will automatically control the air delivery mode.
[ (Floor): This mode directs the air to the
floor outlets.
For more information on how to use the front climate
control system, see Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-44.
Manual Operation
For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet
under the front seats clear of any objects so that the air
inside of your vehicle can circulate effectively.
«A ª (Fan): Press these up or down arrow
buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed.
«b ª (Temperature): Press these up or down
arrow buttons to increase or decrease the temperature
for the rear seat passengers. Once the rear setting
temperature is altered from following the front setting
temperature, it will no longer follow changes to the front
setting temperature until the front climate control
AUX button resets it.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may need to
be changed periodically. For how often to change the
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
To access the passenger compartment air filter, do the
following:
1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If your vehicle
has tabs that allow you to unlatch the cover with
your fingers, you will not need a tool for this step.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on
the inboard side of the air filter compartment to
carefully pry the pin out.
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the air
filter and the compartment wall on the outboard
side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin
holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the
air filter and any loose debris that may be inside the
air filter compartment.
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear a
click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the
cover into place.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 3-72 for more information.
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
The odometer mileage can be checked without
the vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works
together with the driver information center. You can set
a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information”
more information.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on the
for more information.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag if
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag. See
this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
When you turn the engine
on, this light will come on
briefly to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems
{CAUTION:
are working properly.
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the airbags.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
more information.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
United States
Canada
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly as you start the
engine, for vehicles
equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System.
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds. That
is normal.
It will then come on only when a flat or low tire pressure
condition exists.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the antilock portion of the
brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have antilock brakes.
more information.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF/ACC. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles equipped with
the StabiliTrak® system,
this warning light
The traction control system
warning light should come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
should come on briefly
when the engine is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system and your
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is
on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
information.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
more information.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage
shows the engine
coolant temperature.
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine is very hot.
This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up
and to make sure your cooling system is operating
properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on
could cause your vehicle to overheat, see Overheated
information.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light will come on briefly when you start your
engine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If it
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will
be there to warn you if something goes wrong.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
Rear Fog Lamp Light
This light will come on
when the rear fog lamps
are in use. For more
information see Fog Lamps
on page 3-35.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light, see
on page 2-19.
Canada Only
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
information.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
engine is on.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display warning/status messages. All
messages will appear in the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system
information and the warning/status messages. The
bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer on
the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display also
shows a digital speedometer on the right side.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
customization features.
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RANGE
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling your fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
This display shows the current fuel economy
in either miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflects only
the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and
will change frequently as driving conditions change.
Unlike average economy, this display cannot be reset.
FUEL USED
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The
display will return to zero.
Once the range drops below approximately
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will
show FUEL RANGE LOW.
TIMER ON/OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL
for more information.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and
display the end timing value.
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this display, press the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button
after the timer has been stopped. The display will return
to zero.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVERAGE SPEED
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
T (Vehicle Information): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
OIL LIFE REMAINING
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display. For
example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE
13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will show
LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show
HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You
should change your oil as soon as possible. In addition
to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
page 3-61 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just been changed. It
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine Oil Life
when the system is reset.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNITS
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or
METRIC units.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC shows
the tire pressure for the front tires. Press the vehicle
information button again to view the pressure for
the rear tires.
PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows the
system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF.
If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you
choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The
UFRPA system automatically turns back on after each
vehicle start. When the UFRPA system is turned off and
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will
display the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as
a reminder that the system has been turned off. See
page 3-38 for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in
more information.
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
on page 3-76 for more information.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
DIC Warnings and Messages
This display allows you to match the remote keyless
entry transmitter to your vehicle. To match a remote
keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle, do the
following:
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the set/reset button.
1. Press the vehicle information button until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.
2. Press the set/reset button.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for approximately
15 seconds.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message will display when the automatic
page 3-30 for more information.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message will display when the automatic
page 3-30 for more information.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message will display when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this
message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying
to save the charge in the battery.
This symbol appears with
this message.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display when the tire pressure
in one of the tires needs to be checked. This message will
also display LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,
or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be
checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure
message at a time. To read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset
button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading
page 5-56. The DIC display also shows the tire pressure
values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle
page 3-72. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
warning light will come on. See Low Tire Pressure
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button
until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
When this message displays, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See your GM dealer. See
on page 6-4 for more information.
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEAN RADAR
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
When this message displays, it means that the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled because the radar
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It
may also activate during heavy rain or due to road
spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System”
This symbol appears with
this message.
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message will display when the driver’s door is not
closed completely. You should make sure that the
driver’s door is closed completely.
This message will display whenever the cruise control is
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), after
a few seconds, this message will clear and the
message “SET SPD XX” will display at the bottom of the
DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.
ENGINE HOT – A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message will display when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to your engine.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
This message will display when the oil level is low. See
checking your engine oil.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-25 for more information.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-25 for more information.
This message will display when the engine has
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to pull
your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to
avoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating
when this message is displayed.
This message will display when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message will display when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage. There
could be several malfunctions that might cause this
message. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
as soon as possible.
page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOLLOWING GAP
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears with
this message.
This symbol appears with this message.
This message will display when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
A single chime will sound when this message is
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message will display to show the follow distance
that has been set. There are six follow distances to
choose from. Each follow distance is shown on the DIC
by displaying from one to six bars between two car
more information.
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message will display when you manually turn off
the heated washer fluid system or when the system
automatically turns off. See “Heated Washer Fluid”
information.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
This message will display when you turn on the heated
washer fluid system. See “Heated Washer Fluid”
information.
this message.
HOOD OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message will display when the driver’s side rear
door is not closed completely. You should make
sure that the door is closed completely.
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
PEDAL APPLIED
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing
the accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic
for more information.
This message will display when the hood is not closed
completely. You should make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message will display when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This symbol appears with
this message.
A multiple chime will sound when this message is
information.
This message will display when the passenger’s side
front door is not closed completely. You should
make sure that the door is closed completely.
PARKING ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P), this message will display
to remind the driver that the UFRPA system has been
turned off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn
the UFRPA system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST”
on page 3-38 for more information.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. If this message appears when you attempt to
activate the system, continue driving for several minutes
and then try activating the system again. See Adaptive
RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this message
will display while this feature is active. See Rainsense™
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message will display while you are matching a
remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5
more information.
This message will display when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message will display when the air delivery mode
door or the electronic sensors that control the air
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system serviced by your
GM dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message will display when the battery in your
remote keyless entry transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. The charging
system light will also be displayed on the instrument
for more information. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message will display when the passenger’s side
rear door is not closed completely. You should check to
make sure that the door is closed completely.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message will display if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and
the anti-lock brake system warning light may also be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See
more information. If this happens, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the brake system needs service. See your
page 5-35 for more information.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message will
display if there is a problem with the UFRPA system.
Do not use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic
Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3-38
for more information. See your GM dealer for service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
This message will display if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system. When
this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.
See your GM dealer.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
on page 4-10.
This message will display when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the system which means
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your GM dealer
This message will display if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® system.
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back
on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display if a part on the system
is not working properly. If you drive your vehicle while
any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable,
the warning will come on in about 10 minutes. A sensor
would be missing, for example, if you put different
wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors.
If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be
a problem with the TPM. See your GM dealer.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message will display when the magnetic ride
control or automatic leveling control system is not
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message will display when there is a problem with
the Traction Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your
GM dealer for service. See Traction Control
This message will display when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message may
display and the Traction Control System and
StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panel
cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The
StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the light
for more information.
This message will display when there is a problem with
the vehicle’s transaxle. Have your vehicle serviced
by your GM dealer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message will display when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
SET SPD (Speed)
This message will display when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message will display whenever the cruise control is
set. First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”
message will appear. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE
SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message will clear and
the message “SET SPD XX” will display at the bottom of
the DIC. See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”
page 3-19 for more information.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display when the system is
re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection
on page 5-56 for more information.
This symbol appears with
this message.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message will display if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle. See Content
This message will display when the traction control
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message will display when the gas cap has not
been fully tightened. Recheck the gas cap to ensure that
it is on and tightened properly.
This message will display when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message will display when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until the transaxle cools down or until this
message is removed.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK OPEN
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This symbol appears with
this message.
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message will display when the trunk is not closed
completely. You should make sure that the trunk is
closed completely.
This message will display when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. You should refill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See
information.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message
will display as a reminder to turn off the turn signal.
A multiple chime will sound when this message
is displayed.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The customization features were set to the default
settings when your vehicle left the factory, but they
may have been changed from their default state since
that time.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear
back to English.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to select English as the language in
which all DIC messages will appear.
2. Press the customization button until the FEATURE
SETTINGS screen displays.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), FEATURE
SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear
in English.
DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appear
in German.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear
in French.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appear
in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to
select which doors and when they will automatically
page 2-11 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically
lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound when you press the
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds of the previous command.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive feedback
when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter if the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5
for more information.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be
delayed by 10 seconds after a power door lock switch
is pressed when a door is open, or the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while
a door is open.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. The
locking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up to
10 seconds after a power door lock switch is pressed
when a door is open, or after the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while a
door is open. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work.
If it is dark enough outside, this feature allows you to
select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to
remain on. This happens after the vehicle is unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter or if the
vehicle key is turned to OFF from RUN.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) HIGH BEAMS
CHIME VOLUME
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select to
have the Intellibeam™ system turned off or on. See
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH
BEAMS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set to a
OFF: The Intellibeam™ system will be turned off.
normal level.
ON (default): The Intellibeam™ system will be
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
turned on.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
for more information.
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the easy exit seat feature. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-51
for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu
up/down button to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No seat exit recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature, the power steering column will move up and
forward when the key is removed from the ignition.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat and steering column will stay in the original
exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the memory seat recall feature. See
page 2-51 for more information.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears in the display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
OFF (default): No memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will automatically move to the
stored driving position when the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
REMOTE START
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start feature off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle
using your remote keyless entry transmitter. See
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
{CAUTION:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The ignition is no longer in RUN.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
page 5-3.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Setting the Time (Radio with Single
CD Player)
Enabling the Digital Radio Clock
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If
you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable
the radio clock display.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital
Radio Clock
1. Press the clock button until the clock and date
setting menus appear.
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player, it
has a clock button for setting the time and date. To set
the time and date, do the following:
2. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
1. Press the clock button and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) will
appear on the display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
2. Press the pushbutton located under each one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the
date if selected, will increase by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD button.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
will display Radio Clock ON for five seconds,
then return to the original clock display menu.
3. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK
arrow or the REV button. You can also rotate the
tune knob to adjust the selected setting.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
will display Radio Clock OFF for five seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings will be removed,
and the ON display will appear as a current
status indicating that the clock display can be turned
on, if desired.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you may need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize
both clocks.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
1. Press the MENU button until the clock label
display appears.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the clock label
until the clock and date settings appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow label until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Setting
To change the time and date default setting, do the
following:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/
year to day/month/year, by pressing the clock button.
2. Once the clock and date settings are displayed
along with the forward arrow, press the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow until the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,
and year) are displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the clock button again to apply
the selected default, or let the screen time out.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
will display Radio Clock ON for five seconds,
then return to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
will display Radio Clock OFF for five seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings will be removed,
and the ON display will appear as a current
status indicating that the clock display can be turned
on, if desired.
Setting the Time (Radio with
Six-Disc CD Player)
Enabling the Digital Radio Clock
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If
you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable
the radio clock display.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you may need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize
both clocks.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital
Radio Clock
Changing the Time and Date
Default Setting
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, it
has a MENU button for setting the time and date. To set
the time and date, do the following:
To change the time and date default setting, do the
following:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/
year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENU
button.
1. Press the MENU button until the clock option is
displayed.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the clock label
and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year) will appear on the display.
2. Once the clock symbol is displayed, press the
pushbutton located under that symbol until the
time and date settings are displayed along with a
forward arrow.
3. Press the pushbutton located under each one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the
date if selected, will increase by one.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the date
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD button.
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) are displayed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
4. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK
arrow or the REV button. You can also rotate the
tune knob to adjust the selected setting.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters will appear on the display. In
rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect
information that will cause the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather, and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio
and text information that includes song title and artist
name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
will only work when the information is available.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AudioPilot®: If your vehicle is equipped with Bose®
Premium audio, the system will have AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology.
To use AudioPilot® press the Automatic Volume Control
screen button to access the AudioPilot® menu and
then press the ON screen button. AudioPilot®
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the volume.
automatically adjusts the volume level of the audio so
that it always sounds the same to you. The feature
is most effective at lower volume settings where
background noise may be louder than the audio. At high
volume settings there may be little or no change in
the audio level. In some cases where the noise level
changes quickly, you may hear the audio level changing.
This is normal. For more information on AudioPilot®,
please visit www.bose.com.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio is also
equipped with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV).
When SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed
up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you drive.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
To activate AudioPilot®, do the following steps:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display will time out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the AUTO
VOLUM label on the radio display.
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature
on or off.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls (if equipped). See Defensive
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped). The display will show the selection.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
three seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press the information button
to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice
of additional information such as: Channel, Song,
Artist, CAT may appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels
and the information about that label will be displayed.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until you
hear a beep. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
When information is not available, No Info will appear on
the display.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust
the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD, or REV button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is
static, decrease the treble.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the level will be adjusted
to the middle position.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the tune knob for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified
radio, perform the following steps to setup the
equalization settings:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune
knob until the tone control labels appear on the display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
1. Press the Tune knob until the equalization label
appears on display.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization
label to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY, TALK,
JAZZ, and CLAS, to appear on display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired setting.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Bose® amplified radio, perform the following
steps to setup the equalization settings:
under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You
can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
the SEEK, FWD or REV buttons until the desired
levels are obtained.
1. Press the Tune knob until the equalization label
appears on display.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization
label to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and
Surround, to appear on display.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. You will hear a
beep and the level will be adjusted to the middle
position.
Press either fourth or fifth positioned pushbutton
located under the displayed Surround until
Centerpoint appears on display.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the tune knob for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired setting.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual appears on the display or start to manually adjust
the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing the tune knob.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP): This feature is used
to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the
audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode, press
the tune knob until the DSP control label appears on
the display. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP
label until the control labels appear. Continue by
pressing the desired button below the control labels on
the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels
appear on the display. Continue pressing to highlight
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on the control label displays, see
the following:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for normal mode, this provides the best
sound quality for all seating positions.
• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for the driver to receive the best
possible sound quality.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name is displayed.
• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
• Surround (Centerpoint™): Select this screen
button to enable Bose Centerpoint™. Centerpoint™
produces a surround sound listening experience
from a CD, MP3/WMA, or XM stereo digital
audio source and will deliver five independent audio
channels from conventional two channel stereo
recordings. (Not available for AM, FM, or
auxiliary sources.)
3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons below the
right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or
left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous
XM™ station within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Surround Centerpoint™ is for vehicles equipped with
Bose® Premium audio only.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
The radio will not allow you to remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than five mph
(eight km/h).
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
The CAT button will also toggle between compressed
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
Radio Messages
3. Rotate the tune knob to display the category you
want removed.
Locked: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed appears on the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
encryption code
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
No Title Info
No CAT Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
XM Theftlocked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
XM Feature
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
CAT button pressed
when not in XM mode
The CAT function is exclusive to XM. The system is
working properly.
XM Not Available
XM Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the radio display. As each new track starts to play
the track number will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject the CD.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the
CD will be automatically pulled back into the player.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD
currently playing.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
track. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
times, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the display
between the track number, elapsed time of the track,
and the time. When the ignition is off, press this button
to display the time (if the clock display is enabled).
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and track
number will appear on the display when a CD is in the
player. Press this button again and the system will
automatically search for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player
is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found will
be displayed.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to CD
tracks in random, rather than sequential order. This
feature is not available in playlist mode. To use random,
do the following:
1. To play tracks from the CD you are listening to in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label. The random icon will appear
on the display.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play. The random icon will disappear from
the display.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and Load All Discs will
be displayed.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button. You will hear a beep and Ejecting
Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc will appear on display. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
will be automatically pulled back into the player and
begin playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use
random, do one of the following:
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
• To play the tracks from the CD you are listening to
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Randomize Current
Disc is displayed. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the tracks on the CD.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
Compressed Audio
The radio will also play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio will read only the
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3/WMA files.
Pressing the CAT button will toggle between
compressed and uncompressed audio format.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number will appear
on the display when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system will automatically search for
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No
Aux Input Device Found will be displayed.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
Using an MP3/WMA CD-R or CR-W Disc
The radio will play MP3 and WMA files that were
recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album will be available for display by
the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files. You can
change playlists by using the previous and next folder
buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons. Long
file names, folder names, or playlist names may use
more disc memory space than necessary. To conserve
space on the disc, minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist names. You can also play an MP3
CD-R that was recorded using no file folders. The
system can support up to 8 folders in depth, however,
keep the total number of folders to a minimum in
order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD-R
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player will let you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will be ignored.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will not be displayed on a
CD-R that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
will display ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located
under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to
the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder. If
the root directory has compressed audio files, the
directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory will be
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,
playlists (Px) will always be accessed before root folders
or files.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R will be played in the
following order:
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
Track names longer than 22 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the next
and previous folder button, the seek buttons,
or rotating the tuner knob.
Preprogrammed Playlists
• Play will begin from the first track in the first folder
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last
folder has been played, play will continue from the
first track of the first folder.
You can access preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have playlist
editing capability using the radio. Playlists must have
a file extension of M3U or WPL. These playlists will be
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name will appear on the display.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the seek buttons, or rotating
the tuner knob. Tracks cannot be changed. Songs will
be played sequentially; press the REV or FWD to
advance through the currently playing song.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD Player),
or press the load button and wait for the message to
insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The
player will pull it in, and the CD-R should begin playing.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R in the
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or radio, the CD-R will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
information.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,
press and release this button. You will hear a beep and
Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R will be automatically pulled
back into the player and begin playing.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file will appear on the display.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R currently playing.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to MP3
files on the CD-R in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD-R or all discs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are listening
to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
is displayed. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order by artist
or album. Press the pushbutton located below the
music navigator label. The player will scan the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
may take several minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R. The
radio may begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
will begin playing again.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file will appear on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player will default
to playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player will move to the next artist in
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing MP3
files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. You will go to the next or previous
artist in alphabetic order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number will appear
on the display when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system will automatically search for
an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No
Aux Input Device Found will be displayed.
CD Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
Back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album will begin to play. Once all songs from that album
are played, the player will move to the next album in
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing
MP3 files from that album.
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the data
file format.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below
the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when a portable audio device is playing. Press this
button again and the system will begin playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
Found will be displayed.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Listening to a Portable Audio Player
Navigation/Radio System
To listen to a portable audio player such as an
MP3 player, iPod, PDA, laptop computer (with
microphone output), or cassette player over the radio
and speakers, use a cable with a 3.5 mm jack to
connect your portable audio player to the auxiliary input
jack located on the radio faceplate.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
When a device is connected, the radio automatically
begins playing audio from the device over the
car speakers.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from
your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be
used to trace the radio back to your vehicle.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the volume of
the portable player. You may need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if
the volume does not go loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it
or power it off.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
to silence the system. Press this button again or
turn the volume knob to turn the sound on.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The audio steering wheel
controls may be different
depending on your
vehicles options. Some
audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the index of your vehicle’s navigation
system manual for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), radio, or CD.
+ / − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station and stay there. The system will only seek
radio stations with strong frequencies.
x w (Next/Previous): Press the up or the
When the seek arrow is pressed and held for
two seconds, the system will scan the radio stations
that are in the selected band. If listening to a CD,
the system will advance to the next track of that
particular CD.
down arrow to go to the next or to the previous preset
radio station.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or previous track.
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in
the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and hold this
button to interact with the OnStar system. If your vehicle
is also equipped with the navigation system, push this
button to initiate voice recognition and say, “OnStar”
on page 2-43 in this manual for more information.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of
XM signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
Care of the CD Player
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. If
the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be
covered by your warranty.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up
stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear
the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message, the
traction control system warning light and the StabiliTrak®
warning light will come on to let you know if there is a
problem with the traction control system. See DIC
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning too much or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system works
the front brakes and reduces engine power (by
closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to limit
wheel spin.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light will flash when the traction control system is limiting
wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS)
hear the system working, but this is normal.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
You can turn the system on or off at any time by
pressing the traction control system button located on
the console or on the end of the column shifter. The DIC
will display TRACTION CONTROL OFF when you
press the button.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
for more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Ride Control
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The StabiliTrak®
system is an advanced computer controlled system that
helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.
The StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. The system cannot be
turned off.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Magnetic Ride
Control that automatically adjusts the ride of your
vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determine the proper system response. If the
controller detects a problem within the system, the
DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS
page 3-76 for more information. If this message appears,
have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the DIC and the traction control system and
StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will be on after first driving the vehicle and
exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for 30 seconds. The
StabiliTrak® system is off until the light has turned off.
This could take up to 15 minutes.
Electronically Controlled Air Ride
Suspension
If you have a Cadillac Professional Vehicle, you may
have a feature called Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension. Air ride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor the system. The
controller receives input from two height sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem with the system, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will display a SERVICE
SUSPENSION SYS message. If this message appears,
have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light on the instrument panel cluster will flash when the
system is operating. See Traction Control System
information. You may also feel or hear the system
working. This is normal.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed
and the traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on if there
is a problem with the system. When this light and the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message are on, the system is
not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Panic Brake Assist
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active. See
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your passenger side outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
seem to be farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration skid is
also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active. See
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes
contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-49.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want to
slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the TCS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
page 4-7.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does not
collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. You should
turn your traction control system off. See Traction
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and Loading
Information label specific to your vehicle will be
provided and installed by the final body manufacturer.
The Tire and Loading Information label, should be
attached to the B-pillar of your vehicle. See the final
stage manufacturer’s manual or contact them directly.
The label shows the original tires installed on your
professional vehicle and the recommended cold
tire inflation pressures for those tires. The label also
tells you the professional vehicle’s capacity weight.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” for important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehicle
specific Certification label is provided by the final stage
manufacturer. The coach-builder should be consulted
if the final stage manufacturer’s label is not present. The
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be
on the driver’s door edge.
Certification Label
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Do not carry more than 194 lbs (88 kg) in the trunk
of your non-professional vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It is automatic, you do not need to
adjust anything.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned to
OFF. You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-23.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”
later in this section for more information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What
is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
These are total maximum weights including the load. But
even that can be too heavy.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, write to:
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can, too.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tire
and Loading Information Label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer Brakes
Following Distance
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly.
Passing
Driving with a Trailer
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform,
parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical
connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the
trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Turns
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.
Parking on Hills
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks behind the
trailer wheels.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do
not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you
are trailering, it is a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• Start your engine,
• Shift into a gear, and
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
• Make sure the parking brake has released.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-25.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-14.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
page 3-66. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-76 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-66.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located
on the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever, located near the
center of the hood. Move the release lever up and
to the right to raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-93.
Engine Oil
If the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL message appears on
the Driver Information Center (DIC), it means you
need to check your engine oil level right away. See
“ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL” under DIC Warnings and
page 5-39.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-25
Checking Engine Oil
page 5-33.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick (Out of
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove it.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-101.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched
area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check the oil
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the
oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation
occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer, a service
station, or a local recycling center for help.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset. To reset the
message, do the following:
1. Turn the key to the ON position without starting
the engine.
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING is
page 3-72.
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until
100% is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1. Loosen and remove the two screws on the top of
the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to
the two hinges located on the inboard side of
the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that may be found in the air
cleaner base.
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the engine
air cleaner/filter housing:
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of
the cover.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and
align the two screws.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing cover.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
{CAUTION:
How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check the
transaxle fluid.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transaxle fluid cap is located next to the radiator
hose and below the engine air cleaner/filter assembly on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, and is marked TRANS
page 5-12 for more information on location.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly
to reach the transaxle fluid cap, turn the cap
counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
Checking the Fluid Level
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
then pull it back out again.
Prepare you vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the
handle clockwise. Reinstall the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the
handle clockwise.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-25.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
If you have to add coolant more than two times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant surge
tank is located toward the
rear of the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank
that faces the engine.
For more information on location, see Engine
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
more information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-76 for more information. You will also
hear a chime.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure to turn the
cap until it clicks.
There is also an engine temperature warning light
and/or gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and
engine performance. This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you
can drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-13.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant
may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Any repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the level is not at the FULL COLD mark located
on the side of the surge tank, add enough of a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank to
bring the level to the FULL COLD mark, but be sure
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap (if equipped), is cool before you
information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise. If
you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge
tank with the proper
mixture to the
FULL COLD mark on
the side of the
coolant surge tank.
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on
the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight
and fully seated.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
reservoir is located next to
the underhood fuse
block on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-76 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location
and access.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message will be displayed
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
Notice:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Battery
Brake Adjustment
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To
page 5-96. You do not need to access the battery to jump
{CAUTION:
A battery that is not properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage your
rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be
able to see this damage, and the safety belts
might not provide the protection needed in a
crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed,
it must be vented in the same manner as the
original battery. Always make sure that the
vent hose is properly reattached before
reinstalling the seat cushion.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
{CAUTION:
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
4.6L LD8 Engine shown, 4.6L L37 Engine similar
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the
page 5-12 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on
the rear underseat fuse block.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located behind
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.
It is marked GND (−).
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote terminals are for that
purpose.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall or other
flat surface.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being
performed.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full
tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
sitting on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• The spare tire is in its original location in
the vehicle.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the center
line running through the lens of the headlamp.
Record the distance.
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and mark it.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
for more information.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the
vehicle at the wall or other flat surface where it
was marked it Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Find the center line running through the lens of the
headlamp.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. They
are located under the hood near each headlamp
assembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.
Each one is the top outboard screw by the “ V”
on the cover panel next to the aiming flap.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. If you
turn it clockwise, it will raise the beam and if
you turn it counterclockwise, it will lower the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
hex wrench.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the opposite headlamp.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Turn the engine off.
{CAUTION:
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away from
the windshield.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at
one end which are engaged by the bottom claw set
of the wiper blade. At the notched end of the
wiper blade, pull the wiper blade element from the
wiper blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point,
and pull the blade assembly down toward the
windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
page 6-13.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s owner manual.
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger Car Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-31.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
Light Truck Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a tire size.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first
character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire
engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and
Rim Association.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they are cold. The recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects the
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) that
sends tire pressure information to the Driver Information
Center (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, the
driver is able to check tire pressure levels in all
for additional information.
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
page 4-31.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Professional Vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The proper inflation of the tires on your professional
vehicle depends on the type of tires on it.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to monitor the amount of pressure in your vehicle’s
tires using radio and sensor technology. A TPMS
sensor, mounted onto the vehicle’s full-size tire and
wheel assembly, transmits tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle. The compact spare
tire and wheel does not have a TPMS sensor.
Tire pressure status and tire pressure warnings are
shown on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Controls and Displays
page 3-76.
• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the cold
inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).
• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires, the
cold inflation pressure depends on the vehicle mass
and should be determined by the vehicle
coach-builder. A tire and loading information label
provided by the final stage manufacturer should be
attached to the B-pillar on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. If the final stage manufacturer’s label is not
present, the coach-builder should be consulted. Do
not use the tire pressures indicated on the General
Motors label. These tire pressures are for the
incomplete vehicle and are not the correct tire
pressures for the completed professional vehicle.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS
will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the DIC and, at the same time, illuminate
the low tire pressure warning symbol, on the instrument
panel cluster.
Operation at inflation pressures below this
recommendation may cause your tires to become
overloaded.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, that
the low tire pressure warning symbol and the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will display when the vehicle
is first started and then turn off as you start to drive
the vehicle. This could be an early indicator that the tire
pressures are getting low and need to be checked
and inflated to the proper pressure.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and
low tire pressure light (telltale) will appear at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
The Tire and Loading Information Label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and their recommended
cold inflation pressures. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31, for the location of the tire and loading
information label. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-56.
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
Accordingly, When the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has
Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
Resetting the TPMS Sensor
Identification Codes
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,
rotate the vehicle’s tires, or install a full-size spare
that has a TPMS sensor, the sensor’s identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. Each tire/wheel position is matched to
the TPMS sensor using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See
your GM dealer for service.
3. Press the Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle
information button until the RELEARN TIRE
POSITIONS displays.
4. Press the set/reset button to allow the system to
learn the tire positions. The horn will sound twice
to indicate that the TPMS is ready, and then
the message TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE will display.
The sensor matching process can begin.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s air pressure,
do not exceed the maximum tire pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
You will have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or
more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel
positions the matching process stops and you will
need to start over.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
One or more missing or inoperable TPMS sensors will
cause the service tire monitor message to be displayed.
See your GM dealer for service if all the TPMS
sensors are installed and the error message comes on
and stays on.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
10. When the re-learning is complete, the horn will
sound and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
will clear from the DIC display. Exit the matching
process by turning the ignition switch to OFF.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and
loading information label.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
1. This device may not cause interference, and
The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
If you replace one of the road tires with the compact
spare, the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
message will be displayed on the DIC screen. This
message should go off once you re-install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor. The SERVICE TIRE
MONITOR SYSTEM message is also displayed when a
part of the TPMS is not working properly.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-69 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare tire and
wheel assembly that matches the original equipment
tires and wheels in size, type and brand. The correct
five-tire rotation pattern is shown.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
page 4-31.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) will need to have the sensors reset after a tire
rotation is performed. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should not be
included in the tire rotation process. Use the four-tire
rotation pattern shown.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-72.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
page 5-50 for additional information.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire
and wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a
compact spare tire and wheel, they have the
same overall diameter as your vehicle’s
full-size tires and wheels. Because they were
designed and developed for use on your
vehicle, it is all right to drive your vehicle with
the compact spare installed properly. Compact
spare tires are designed for temporary use
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
{CAUTION:
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum
wheels can sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer
if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle
page 5-72 for more information.
Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk. To
access the equipment, do the following:
information.
2. Press the area at the
front of the handle
located on the cover
so that the back
edge raises.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
3. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds
the wrench and jack.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from
information.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen
them using the wheel wrench. Do not remove
them yet.
1. For models having aluminum wheels with a center
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to gently pry the wheel covers off. Be careful
not to scratch the aluminum wheel edge and do not
try to remove it with your hands. Then loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel wrench. Do not remove
them yet.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
{CAUTION:
3. Find the jacking location from the diagram above
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the
plastic molding.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear
location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into
the channel of the jack head.
6. Put the spare tire near you.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
11. Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
5-Wheel Nuts
8-Wheel Nuts
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, you
will need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised
until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire, if equipped. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).
Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into the
center of the compact spare tire making sure to
line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the
compartment floor.
4. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C) and
then the wing nut (B).
5. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
A. Cover
E. Jack Container
F. Spare Tire
G. Bolt
B. Wing Nut
C. Retainer
D. Jack and Wheel
Wrench
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F) with the valve stem up,
and line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) or
wheel center and place on the compartment floor.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, which,
when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose
air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly.
proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For
instructions on how to remove, install or store a spare
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tire, that was originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Covers
Washing Your Vehicle
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Care of Safety Belts
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-86.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Spot Lifter
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have the headlamp wiring checked right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
The fuses are located in two fuse blocks, one located in
the engine compartment, and the other under the
rear seat. If a fuse should blow, have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger’s
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse
cover and secondary service cover to access the
fuse block.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer
for service immediately.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F1
F2
F3
F4
Usage
Fuses
F5
F6
F7
F8
Usage
Powertrain Control Module
Transaxle
Spare
Spare
Spare
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Airbag
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F9
Usage
J-Case Fuse
JC1
Usage
Heated Windshield Washer
Cooling Fan High
Spare
Spare
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
High Beam Headlamp
High Beam Headlamp
Windshield Washer Pump
Spare
Climate Controls
Spare
JC2
JC3
JC4
JC5
JC6
JC7
JC8
Crank
Cooling Fan Low
Anti-lock Brake System 2
Anti-lock Brake System 1
Air Pump
Fog Lamps
Horn
Windshield Wiper
Lamp
Relay
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Crank
Powertrain
Spare
Lamp
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain
Engine Control Module
Crank
Electric Ignition
Air Conditioning
Air Solenoid
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module
Ignition
Cooling Fan 3
Windshield Wiper
Air Pump
Windshield Wiper High
Air Conditioning
Air Control
R9
F28
R10
R11
R12
F29
F30
F31
F32
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on
the driver’s side. The rear seat cushion must be
removed to access the rear fuse block.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid
contact between the rear seat and the fuse
center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear
seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, near
the battery cable.
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the
vehicle.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
CAUTION: (Continued)
safety belt has not been routed through the
seat cushion at all, it will not be there to work
for the next passenger. The person sitting in
that position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
{CAUTION:
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If the
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Climate Control Fan
Rear Defogger (Option)
Automatic Leveling
Control/Compressor
Fuses
F3
Usage
JC1
JC2
Interior Lamps
Courtesy Lamps, Passenger’s Side
Turn Signal
F4
F5
F6
JC3
Canister Vent
Electronic Suspension
Control (Option)
Automatic Leveling Control
Module (Option)
Fuses
F1
F2
Usage
Amplifier
Navigation (Option)
F7
F8
Rear Seat Lumbar (Option)
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F9
Usage
Door Unlatch (Option)
Switch Dimmer
Fuel Pump
Body Control Module Logic
Airbag
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Driver’s Side Turn Signal
Right Rear Turn Signal
Not Used
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
Fuses
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
Usage
Not Used
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
Instrument Panel Harness Module
Rear Heated Seats (Option)
Not Used
Steering Wheel Illumination
Body Harness Module
Memory Seat Module Logic, Right
Front Massage (Option)
Object Detection Sensor
Sunroof
F36
F37
F38
F40
F18
Shifter Solenoid (Option)
F19
F20
F21
F22
Rear Door Locks
Stoplamp (Option)
Radio
Retained Accessory Power,
Miscellaneous
Driver’s Side Park Lamp
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp
Heated Steering Wheel (Option)
Rear Climate Control
Not Used
Heated/Cooled Seats,
Ignition 3 (Option)
F41
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
OnStar® (Option)
Auxiliary Power Outlet, Cigarette
Lighter, Console
Driver Door Module
Passenger Door Module
Trunk Release (Option)
Heated/Cooled Seats (Option)
Not Used
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F47
F48
F49
Ignition Switch
Not Used
Regulated Voltage Control Sense
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Circuit
Relays
R3
R4
Usage
Usage
Breakers
Run (Option)
Front Passenger’s Seat, Memory
Seat Module
Driver’s Power Seat, Memory
Seat Module
Door Module, Power Windows
Memory Seat Module, Tilt/
Telescoping Steering Wheel (Option)
Park Lamps (Option)
Front Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Fan
CB1
R5
CB2
CB3
CB4
R6
R7
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Door Unlatch, License Plate
Lamp (Option)
R8
R9
Door Lock
Resistor
Usage
Terminating Resistor
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
Door Unlock
F39
Overhead Lamps (Option)
Stoplamps (Option)
Not Used
Rear Defogger (Option)
Electronic Leveling
Control Compressor
Relays
R1
R2
Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Park Lamps
R15
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
12.9 qt
7.5 qt
Metric
12.2 L
7.1 L
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
18.5 gal
15.0 qt
100 lb ft
70.0 L
14.2 L
140 Y
Transaxle
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
4.6L DOHC V8
4.6L DOHC V8
Y
9
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Control Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Throttle body service. An Emission
Control Service. See footnotes † and (l).
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Except Professional Vehicle: Engine
cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (j).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Professional Vehicle Only: Engine
cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (j).
•
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
maintenance be recorded.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, and console door.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect all
surfaces. Clean as required.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-63.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on
a level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-29.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic
Transaxle
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-22.
Engine Coolant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
22676970
ACDelco® Part Number
A1627C
PF61
89017342
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
25689297
12571535
CF118C
41–987
Wiper Blade
21.7 in (55.0 cm)
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
25753757
25753758
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For resolution of issues related to the Cadillac
Professional Vehicle, contact 1-800-43-FLEET
(1-800-433-5338).
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-43-FLEET (1-800-433-5338) (Cadillac
Professional Vehicle)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to the addresses below.
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any situation
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in
the United States and Canada.
• Towing Service
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Service Availability
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer
technician, if available, can travel to your location within a
30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac
has installed special telecommunication devices called
Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
Courtesy Transportation
• A description of the problem
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available, for up
to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Program Information
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
Collision Damage Repair
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
Collision Parts
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for
a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-124
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings (cont.)
Windshield (cont.)
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|